Chrysler 300 2014 Owner`s manual

2014 300
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14C481-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
300
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features
and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered
on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive.
Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use
public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself
to install them on products previously manufactured.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink
and then drive.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .54
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .55
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .66
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .98
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion).
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
SENTRY KEY®
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause underized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
sired operation.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- by the party responsible for compliance could void the
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an user’s authority to operate the equipment.
authorized dealer.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Customer Key Programming
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
performed at an authorized dealer.
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
General Information
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will proand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
subject to the following conditions:
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
will flash.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the following methods:
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previinformation.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
key to the ON position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furTamper Alert
ther information.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
NOTE:
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors
Flash Lights With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the signal lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature
can be turned on or turned off. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using The Panic Alarm
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
lights will turn on.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Instrument Panel” for further information.
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
To Unlatch The Trunk
(24 km/h) or greater
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
NOTE:
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
and horn will remain on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
other hand.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Emergency Key Removal
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
housing or the printed circuit board.
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE:
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
distance, check for these two conditions:
may reduce this range.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
How To Use Remote Start
the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
engine will remote start:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
• Shift lever in PARK
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Trunk closed
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • Hazard switch off
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE panic button not pushed
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
Press and release the REMOTE START button
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Vehicle
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
NOTE:
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Start request.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Remote Start mode.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped).
Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and
release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in
the EVIC until you push the START button.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
Door Lock Knob
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
upward.
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
power door locks if:
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enChild-Protection Door Lock system.
abled.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
Door Lock System
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
1. Open the rear door.
placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
door is unlocked.
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Transmitter In Vehicle
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the
• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
OFF position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
2
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
Trunk Passive Entry Button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
located on the deck lid.
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
2
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Reset Auto-Up
the first detent and release it when you want the window Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
to stop.
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
NOTE:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
switch again to close the window.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
detent to open the window completely and continue
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoto hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
after the window is fully open.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors and the rear sunscreen (if
equipped). To disable the window controls and the rear
sunscreen, press and release the window lockout button
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window
controls and the rear sunscreen, press and release the
window lockout button again (setting it in the UP
position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Window Lockout Switch
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
button will operate.
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
The trunk lid can be released from Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
outside the vehicle by pressing the trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
twice within five seconds or by
WARNING!
using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
decklid overhang. The release feaeither by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
Trunk Release
ture will function only when the
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
Button
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
Some of the most important safety features in your
energy during an impact event
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Active Hood System
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenseat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
ger
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering possible.
wheel
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
buckled up in a rear seat.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”).
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. Your vehicle
has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) or Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SAB), and if deployment occurs, the SABIC
and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between you and the door.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
(Continued)
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. • N/A — Not Applicable
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
the latch plate.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
folded webbing.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
secure a child restraint system. For additional information, to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortBelt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click⬙.
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second
Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
the occupant’s chest.
(BeltAlert®)
Energy Management Feature
Seat Belt Pretensioner
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Seat Belt Extender
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Air Bag Warning Light
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Steering Wheel and Column
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in • Instrument Panel
the outboard side of the front seats.
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
NOTE:
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
authorized dealer immediately.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the side air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the protection for the driver and front passenger.
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
required for this vehicle.
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or including some that may produce substantial vehicle
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little vehicle
several factors, including the severity and type of impact. front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec- The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
collisions depending on several factors, including the type of collision.
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
have deployed.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliLight in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
comes on again after initial startup.
on and the air bags will not inflate.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
15 to 20 milliseconds.
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag event the ORC will determine whether to have the
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followcurtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when ing functions:
it is inflated.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
until the ignition key is turned off.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
Front And Side Impact Sensors
the battery has power, until the ignition key is reIn front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
the Keyless Go START/STOP button.
events.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
the communication network remains intact, and the changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
or all of the following may occur:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s infront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defloor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• For
additional
information,
refer
to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
N/A
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system
to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position only.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
2
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autodo not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
belt following the instructions below. See the section
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
position.
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
to allow more room for the child seat.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- used by other occupants or being used to secure child
ing position.
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
tions to attach a tether anchor.
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
turer’s instructions.
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes, center position only.
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
vehicle seat.
“click”.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
anchor.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
Adjustable Headrest Downward Position
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Defroster
Air Bag Warning Light
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
able.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .116
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .114
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .183
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .188
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .189
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .195
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .201
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .206
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL). . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .208
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .210
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .214
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .222
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .223
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .230
▫ Front Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .254
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .235
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .254
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .236
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .238
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .255
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .242
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . .245
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
. . .258
. . .259
. . .260
. . .261
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .262
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .264
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .268
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 䡵 COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .272
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . .
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
.275
.276
.276
.277
.277
.277
.277
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .278
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .290
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Trunk Mat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Power Sunshade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .295
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .297
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and is only disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
lane next to your vehicle.
This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dim-
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
ming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight
glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
NOTE: This feature is also available on the passenger’s
side when equipped with turn signal and approach
lighting.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door
handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area
in front of the doors.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inshift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
formation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver’s tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
door trim panel.
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
to the normal driving position.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.
3
Slide-On-Rod Feature
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 m.p.h. (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
BSM Warning Light
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane,
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
12 ft (3.8 m) on both sides of the vehicle. The zone starts
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
at the outside rear view mirror and extends approxitime the vehicle is in a forward gear.
mately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 m.p.h. (48 km/h).
3
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
of less than 15 m.p.h. (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 m.p.h.
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
used.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav
General Information
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, inThis vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone althat comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada phone.
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Voice Activated Features:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
Blind Spot Alert Off
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming Screen Activated Features
SMS messages.
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks disSmith Mobile”).
played on the touchscreen.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Back”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
Recent Calls”).
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John • Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
Smith Mobile”).
touchscreen.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. For
Uconnect® customer support, visit the following website:
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
• Canadian residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con(French).
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
microphone for private conversation.
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone and one audio device can be used with the system your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect®
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or Voice Command section for direction on how to use
the
button.
French languages.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
button is used to
The Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view
switch), if so equipped.
phonebook etc., When you press the button
you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give Operation
a command.
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Uconnect® Phone Button
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
button
The Uconnect® Voice Command
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methis only used for “barge in” and when you are
ods for how Voice Command works:
already in a call and you want to send Tones
or make another call.
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile.”
button is also used to access the Voice Com-
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
The
mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following compound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
compound command form of the voice command is
would like to.”
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
it. For example, you can use the compound command or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press
the
button on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sesbutton on the radio
sions begin with a press of the
control head.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
button on your steering
the “Voice Command”
wheel.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
or
button on your
You can also push the
steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous
menu.
Help Command
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
Voice Command Tree
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
3
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
Mobile Phone Pairing
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
screen.
priority.
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • “Show Paired Phones”
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
• “Connect My Phone”
screen.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
while the system is connecting.
1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make 3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired
Audio Devices screen.
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring up
system, a pop-up will appear.
a list of paired audio devices:
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- • “Show Paired Phones”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
• “Connect My Phone”
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
Audio Device After Pairing
while the system is connecting.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make Device follow these steps:
this device the highest priority. This device will take
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the 2. Touch the “Paired Phone” or “Paired Audio Source”
soft-key.
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher 3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the particular
priority.
Audio Device.
4. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
5. Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Paired Phone” or “Audio Device” soft-key. 6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
device name.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the
device name.
6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
5. Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
chosen device move to the top of the list.
2. Touch the “Pair Phone” or “Audio Device” soft-key.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
than the currently connected device.
6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries downnames) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availBook Access Profile may support this feature. See
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availUconnect® website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported
able for use.
phones.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
phone is accessible.
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
QUICK TIPS” section.
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transsupported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
phone connection.
example, after you start the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phonebook from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
3
Phonebook Favorites
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the “+” soft-key located to the right of
the phonebook record. Select an empty entry and
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
touch the “+” on that selected entry. When the Options To Remove A Favorite
pop-up appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
then be asked which contact and number to choose
Phone main screen.
from your mobile phonebook. When complete the
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
new favorite will be shown.
then touch the + Options soft-key.
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
Add From Mobile
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
Remove From Favorites
2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Favorites.
4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
Favs.”
4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect® Phone.
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose • Redial
between Editing the number or resetting the number • Dial by pressing in the number
to default.
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
• SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Press the
button to begin,
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, •
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”
•
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number 151-1234•
5555.
•
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
•
1. Press the
button on your steering wheel to begin.
•
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
•
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call.”
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button on your steering wheel while in a call
the
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail
Password” if Voicemail password is stored in your
mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
Recent Calls
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
• Missed Calls
following call types:
• All Calls
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls” Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
button and say “Show my If a call is currently in progress and you have another
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
calls will be displayed.
button on the steermobile phone. Press the phone
You can also press the
button and say “Show my
ing wheel, “answer” soft-key or caller ID box to place
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen
the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
will be displayed.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
“Recent” or “Missed.”
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysbutton on your steering wheel to
tem. Press the
accept the call. You can also touch the “answer”
soft-key or touch the caller ID box.
Progress
You can place a call on hold by touching the “Hold”
soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Call Termination
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
butto “Join Calls” in this section.
ton on the steering wheel or the “end” soft-key. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
on hold, it will become the new active call.
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the
Phone main screen.
Redial
Touch the “Redial” soft-key, or press the
and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “ReIf two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
dial.”
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
dialed from your mobile phone.
button on the steering wheel
You can also press the
to toggle between the active and held phone call.
Call Continuation
Toggling Between Calls
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
switched to OFF.
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Join Calls
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to touch the
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
Uconnect® Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen.
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
reachable:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
number for your area.
area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
follows:
for the mobile phone directly.
button to begin.
1. Press the
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect® Phone.
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
Working With Automated Systems
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
1. Push the
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.” system or an automated service, such as a paging service
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is or automated customer service line. Some services rebased on the country where the vehicle is purchased quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
(1-800- 521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
button on the steering
touchscreen or press the
wheel and say the word “Send” then the sequence you
wish to enter. For example, if required to enter your
PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press
button on the steering wheel and say, “Send 3
the
7 4 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or
sequence of numbers, is also to be used for navigating
through an automated customer service center menu
structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
NOTE:
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
button on the
Password”, then if you press the
steering wheel and say “Send Voicemail Password”
the Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook
entry, as tones over the phone.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
a numbered sequence.
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The
button on the steering wheel can be used
when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
your voice command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking “There are two numbers with the
name John. Say the full name” you could press the
button on the steering wheel and say, “John
Smith” to select that option without having to listen to
the rest of the voice prompt.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Voice Response Length
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then
touch the “Settings” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING! (Continued)
of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and
that you become aware of applicable laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the “Mute”
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
button on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dial- Advanced Phone Connectivity
ing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same as The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
if you dial the number using voice a command.
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
a voice command period.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® Performance is maximized under:
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Voice Command
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
• Dry Weather Condition
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
When navigating through an automated system such as
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in • Dry Weather Conditions
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
the Uconnect® Phone.
Even though international dialing for most number comEcho at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
combinations may not be supported.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
Far End Audio Performance
compromised with the convertible top down.
Audio quality is maximized under:
Voice Text Reply
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out Read Messages:
and the feature will not be available for use.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Voice Text List
NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Voice Text Reply
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
3
• Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message.”
Preset Message List
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
sent.
you wish to send the message to.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Press the
button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and
interrupt the system by pressing the
saying the message you want to send.
Preset Message List
After the system confirms that you want to send your
List of Preset Messages:
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
4. I can’t talk right now.
17. I’m lost.
5. Call me.
18. See you later.
6. I’ll call you later.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
7. I’m on my way.
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name
which phone number you want to send a message to
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
for John Smith.
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “VoiceYou can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
These commands can be used during a phone call after
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE:
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.”
not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod® and
SiriusXM Travel Link.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
• This device must accept any interference received, or a raised voice level.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal session will end.
to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
“Help.”
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
These commands are universal and can be used from any To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Command
button and say “Help.” You will hear
the active application.
available commands for the screen displayed.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
question to which the user can respond without pressing
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
button.
the Uconnect® Voice Command
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I Uconnect® Voice Commands
would like to.”
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase two types of commands. Universal commands are availor sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly able at all times. Local commands are available if the
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- supported radio mode is active.
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Comprovides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who mand
button.
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Natural Speech
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
button.
Command
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume Source
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
system.
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
mode or screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE:
• You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
• You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
• You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
• You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE:
• You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
• You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
• Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
• VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE:
• You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
• You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
• You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE:
• Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
• You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
• Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE:
• You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Recently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
• You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,”
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,”
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
SEATS
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
vehicle.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control — (If Equipped)
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
Power Lumbar Switch
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatiThe front heated seats control buttons are located within
cally after a maximum of 45 minutes.
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
once to turn the High
• Press the heated seat button
to operate.
setting On.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the Low setting On.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
remote start.
the heating elements Off.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the Rear Heated Seats
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
Front Heated Seats
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passen- provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
gers to operate the seats independently.
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
system will automatically switch to LO-level after apindicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
LO and none for OFF.
to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating. turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Press the switch a second time to select LOFront Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
level heating. Press the switch a third time to
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the
shut the heating elements OFF.
air from the passenger compartment and pull air through
NOTE:
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and LOW.
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
once to choose
• Press the ventilated seat button
HIGH.
Head Restraints
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LOW.
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a second time to Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
a third time to
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
Push Button
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
downward on the head restraint.
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
Adjustment Button
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
NOTE:
The
outboard
head restraints are not adjustable.
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seat
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust- The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
push downward on the head restraint.
the loops located on the upper seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
3
Folded Rear Seatback
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
NOTE:
• Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
• Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the
memory function. Use either the memory recall switch
or the RKE transmitter (if linked to the memory
feature) to recall memory positions 1 or 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
button, which is used to activate the memory save
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds,
memory buttons (1)
Information Center
memory position has
Memory Seat Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
press and release either of the
or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
(EVIC) will display which
been set.
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
1. Place the ignition into the RUN position.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
transmitter within 10 seconds.
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and pressinformation.
ing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- transmitter in Step 4.
ing:
Memory Position Recall
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if
the system to complete the memory recall before equipped).
continuing to Step 3.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release MEMORY button number (1) on the driver’s door or the
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory memory position 1.
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
cluster.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
MEMORY button number (2) on the driver’s door or the you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
memory position 2.
• When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat,
or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and
The seat will return to its previously set position when
telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A
you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
position.
be selected.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
or Easy Entry.
vehicle.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Safety Latch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
vehicle in an unlit area.
will come on in the automatic mode.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
Automatic Headlights Only)
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the Equipped
delay.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
turn off in the normal manner.
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
NOTE:
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of from high beams to low beams until the approaching
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this vehicle is out of view.
feature.
NOTE:
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruinformation.
ment Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights To Deactivate
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
operation of low beams).
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
reactivate the system.
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
dealer.
Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
the direction the vehicle is steering.
position.
NOTE:
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on,
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
sequence of rotations.
at or above 15 mph (35 km/h).
To Activate
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
the vehicle is moving forward.
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruusing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Setment Panel” for further information.
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when- is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
headlights are off, the transmission is moved out of Fog Lights — If Equipped
“PARK” position, and the parking brake is off. The
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
driving.
switch.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped
The rear fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the rear fog lights, turn
the headlamp switch to the park lamp or headlamp position. Press the headlight switch once for front
fog lights, press the switch a second time for front and
rear fog lights. Pressing the switch a third time will
deactivate the rear fog lights, and a fourth time will
deactivate the front fog lights. Turning the headlight
switch off will also deactivate the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Lane Change Assist
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash head console.
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
3
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second time. The lights will also turn on when the Courtesy Lights
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
pressed.
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Interior Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilTo protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor and center console area.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Ambient Light
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
equipped).
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Ambient Light Control
Dome Light Position
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console. lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC, and radio when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Intermittent Wiper System
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
the intermittent interval previously selected.
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
and then turn off.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable FeaWARNING!
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
windshield with the defroster before and during feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
windshield washer use.
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position, the automatic transmission shift lever is in
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped steering column.
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column switch is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or down
as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from
you as desired.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element On.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element Off.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
WARNING!
(Continued)
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
Adjustable Pedals Switch
from the driver to provide improved position with the
Press
the
switch
forward to move the pedals forward
steering wheel.
(toward the front of the vehicle).
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
cushion side shield.
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
To Vary The Speed Setting
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can dethe new set speed will be established.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Accelerate For Passing
To Decrease Speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
the vehicle ahead.
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise
Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
4 — CANCEL
5 — ON/OFF
6 — MODE
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
Driver Override
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
To Cancel
The system will disable ACC without erasing the
memory if:
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
3
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- To Turn Off
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, memory if:
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
To Vary The Speed Setting
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your To Increase Speed
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
last set speed.
pressing the RES + button.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
20 mph (32 km/h).
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• RES + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set
speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
• RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h increase in
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reset speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in
flected in the EVIC display.
an increase of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the EVIC display.
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing the SET - button.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
NOTE:
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
will automatically slow the vehicle.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
U.S. Speed (mph)
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Set 3 (long)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
3
Distance Set 2 (medium)
Distance Set 1 (short)
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short).
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator”
icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
speed.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
the sensor.
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
(25 km/h) and the system automatically disengages from the vehicle ahead.
itself.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3
Brake Alert 3
Brake Alert 2
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
Brake Alert 1
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The • When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
Cruise Control Ready.”
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
ACC SET
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC”
• When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC
or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line.
• The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to
while ACC is set.
display the following information:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
• Set Speed Change
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Driver Override
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
• System Off
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
• ACC Proximity Warning
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
• ACC Unavailable Warning
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after warning may temporarily occur.
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Display Warnings And Maintenance
Control is still available. For additional information refer
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” section.
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
vehicle behind the lower grille.
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items:
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
operation.
require a sensor realignment.
ACC Unavailable Warning
• If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
malfunction.
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
3
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the
system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of
steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driver
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to
normal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed
if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position.
“Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the
ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive Cruise
Control mode, press the MODE button a second time.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or
changing speed, not the speedometer.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can increase speed by pushing the RES + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
the new set speed will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
• Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
To Cancel
• You turn off the ignition.
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without • You switch off ESC.
erasing the memory if:
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
Normal Cruise Control).
• You press the CANCEL button.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control SysThe Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
To Resume
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set time to react and avoid the potential collision.
speed.
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
To Turn Off
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
memory if:
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of Changing FCW Status
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
deactivated.
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® SetNOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will
10 mph (16 km/h).
be displayed in the Uconnect® display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system FCW Unavailable Warning
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
in front of you.
FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
NOTE:
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
Uconnect® display.
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will
display on the EVIC screen.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
ParkSense® Sensors
ParkSense® Warning Display
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in
(150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/ fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the debumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is tected obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Display
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
Park Assist Display
Park Assist System ON
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3
Park Assist System OFF
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
Greater than
59 in (150 cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
Arc
None
WARNING ALERTS
59-39 in
39-25 in
(150-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2 secSlow (for rear
ond tone (for
only)
rear only)
3 Solid
3 Slow Flashing
(Continuous)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow Flashing
1 Slow Flashing
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
further information.
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSbrake pedal is applied.
TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
from the Uconnect® System.
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. cluster will display “PARK ASSIST OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
through ignition cycles.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Park
Assist system has detected a fault condition, the ElecParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for
five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault
condition, the EVIC will display the ⬙CLEAN PARK
ASSIST⬙, ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST⬙, or ⬙SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not
operate.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
system operating properly.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
and/or front fascia/ bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the EVIC will display
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
authorized dealer.
turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST⬙ or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
30 cm from the rear fascia/ bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense® Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense® Park Assist system, it
is strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns on the single
flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
(Continued)
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever further information.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be When the static grid lines have been programmed to turn
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau- on, they will illustrate the width of the vehicle and will
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of show separate zones that will help indicate the distance
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the approximate distances for each zone:
vehicle above the rear License plate.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
3
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
3
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
indicator flashes.
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door follow these steps:
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
not release the button.
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, before 1995.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps:
mitter button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
not release the button.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programfrom slow to rapid.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
remaining steps.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to proFor programming transmitters in Canada/United States
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
view.
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indito pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
fully trained.
time-out in the same manner.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door or gate motor.
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink®
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
Security
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightIf you unplugged the garage door opener/device for ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
programming, plug it back in at this time.
also be used at any time.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
erased.
not release the button.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
WARNING!
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
WARNING!
Troubleshooting Tips
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
WARNING! (Continued)
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Venting Sunroof — Express
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurPress and release the Vent button within one half second rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Ignition OFF Operation
3
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Opening Power Shade — Express
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
held rearward again.
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the
Closing Sunroof — Express
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
shade will automatically open to the full open position
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiDuring Express Open operation, any movement of the
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
shade switch will stop the shade.
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Power Shade — Express
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade opening to the Vent position.
completely.
Pinch Protect Feature
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Ignition OFF Operation
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
Wind Buffeting
will cancel this feature.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs There are three 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
Sunroof Maintenance
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
The center console outlet is powered directly from the has power available only when the ignition is placed in
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into the ACC or RUN position.
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
3
Rear Center Console Power Outlet
Center Console Power Outlet
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located on the back of
the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel And
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cover
Front Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
WARNING!
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Rear Seat Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
STORAGE
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with Glove Compartment
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
of the instrument panel.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Glove Compartment
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the center console armrest.
Opened Glove Compartment
Console Features
Center Console
There is a cubby bin located forward of the shift lever.
The cubby bin is covered with a push-push actuated Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
door. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
a second time to close it.
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Upper Storage Tray
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
Front Door Trim Storage
Rear Armrest Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat — If Equipped
A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The
trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from
mud, snow, and debris.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Cargo Net
The rear cargo area is equipped with a cargo net.
3
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 50 lbs
(22 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
Rear Cargo Net
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE: The rear sunshade control switch can be locked
out along with the rear passenger window controls from
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sunshade
the driver switch window lockout switch.
that will reduce the amount of sunlight that will shine
through the rear windshield.
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
The power sunshade can be operated using the
Uconnect® System.
3
Press the “Controls” soft-key and then press the “Rear
Sunshade” soft-key to raise the power sunscreen. Press
the “Sunshade” soft-key a second time to lower the
sunshade.
If the sunshade is in the raised position and the vehicle is
placed in REVERSE, the sunshade will automatically
fully lower. When the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE the sunshade will automatically return to the
fully raised position after approximately five seconds.
Controls Soft-Key
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sunshade Soft-Key
The power sunshade can also be operated by passengers
in the rears seats. The power sunshade switch is located
on the back of the center console between the heated seat
switches. Press the switch once to raise the sunshade.
Press the switch a second time to lower the sunshade.
Power Sunshade Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . . .322
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .303
▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .304
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ ACC/Cruise Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . .326
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ EVIC White Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Tire PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .329
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .348
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .347
. . .350
. . .351
. . .351
. . .356
. . .357
. . .359
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Uconnect® System
— Climate Control Hard Controls
— Glove Compartment
7 — ESC Off Switch
8 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls
9 — SD Memory Card Slot
10 — Power Outlet
11 — CD/DVD Slot
12 — Storage Compartment
13
14
15
16
17
18
— Engine Start/Stop Button
— Trunk Release Button
— Dimmer Controls
— Hood Release
— Headlight Switch
— Analog Clock
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
4. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
5. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headThis indicator will illuminate when the park
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forlights or headlights are turned on.
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
6. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn Center (EVIC) Display
• Odometer Display
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
The odometer display shows the total distance the
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
vehicle has been driven.
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
you to turn the signals off. If either indicator flashes at a
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the
repair technician should leave the odometer reading
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
NOTE:
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It
PARK.
is a good idea for you to make a record of the
odometer reading before the repair/service, so that
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed
you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the
in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
reset at zero.
Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Disselector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to
play
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
features a driver-interactive display that is located in 7. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
the instrument cluster. For further information, refer
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS monitors engine and automatic transmission control systo continue to function properly.
tems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the
ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/
CAUTION!
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
warning have been established for the tire size illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
CAUTION!
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
9. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
10. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
11. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
12. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
14. Sport Mode — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
based tuning. For further information, refer to
”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.
15. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced 16. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Light — If Equipped
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
trol (ESC) is off.
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Brake Warning Light
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
18. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
when the ignition switch is turned to the
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off system. If this light remains on after several ignition
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see 19. Seat Belt Reminder Light
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
problem diagnosed and corrected.
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
NOTE:
the
driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
to ON/RUN.
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
20. Temperature Gauge
previously.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperamaneuver that caused the ESC activation.
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Cruise Control Info
• Digital Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Stored Warning Messages
• Turn Menu OFF
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info
and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info,
Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menu and Vehicle
Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip
Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and
sub-menus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Controls
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button to access
the information screens or sub-menu screens of
a main menu item. Press and hold the SELECT
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnBACK Button
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Press the BACK button to return to the main
into several categories:
menu from an info screen or sub-menu item.
• Five Second Stored Message
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
1. The top line where compass direction and outside condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
temperature are displayed.
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Exmessage type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙ amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
• Unstored Messages
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal EVIC White Telltales
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell• Unstored Messages Until RUN
tales. These telltales include:
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Shift Lever Status
The selected AutoStick® gear is displayed as ⬙1⬙, ⬙2⬙, ⬙3⬙,
⬙4⬙, or ⬙5⬙ for five-speed automatic transmissions, ⬙1⬙, ⬙2⬙,
⬙3⬙, ⬙4⬙, ⬙5⬙, “6”, “7”, or “8” for eight-speed automatic
transmission and indicate the AutoStick® feature has
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
• Five Second Unstored Messages
further information on AutoStick®, refer to “Starting
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of And Operating”.
message takes control of the main display area for five
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This telltale will illuminate when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Speed Control SET
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is
SET. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Amber Telltales
This telltale will illuminate when the electronic This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellspeed control is SET. For further information, tales. These telltales include:
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This telltale informs the driver that the For• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
ward Collision Warning feature is Off. The
telltale is On when the front radar sensor is
This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is
blocked and requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW
ON. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding sensors require service, or the ACC/FCW system is
unavailable because of a system error. For further inforThe Features Of Your Vehicle.”
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• SERV AWD (Service All Wheel Drive) Indicator — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the All Wheel
Drive feature requires service. For further information, refer to “All Wheel Drive” in “Starting And Operating.”
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windEVIC Red Telltales
shield washer fluid is low.
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
This telltale turns on when one or more doors
operating and needs service. For further inforare ajar. The telltale will show which doors are
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
ajar.
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Trunk Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk
lid is ajar.
• Charging System Telltale
This telltale shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at
• Oil Pressure Warning Telltale
idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for an authorized dealer.
four minutes when this light turns on.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
This telltale informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the
telltale comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the pass H, or 260°F, a continuous chime will occur until the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is engine is allowed to cool.
placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn off.
If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over and
If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the verized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the telltale hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
is required. You may experience reduced performance, an service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may Do In Emergencies” for more information.
require towing.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
• Engine Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
This telltale warns of an overheated engine conoccur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
dition. As temperatures rise and the gauge apIf this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
proaches H, or 260°F, this telltale will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on
vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode.
The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication
within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point
has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
4
GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator
GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator
When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until
display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return
gear.
to a situation where changing gear is not required to
improve fuel consumption.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The ⬙Oil Change Due⬙ message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded at the start of each ignition that an oil
change is due. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy functions displays in the EVIC:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or L/100km
Average Fuel Economy/ECO Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Trip Computer functions.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
tion:
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside
Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Fuel Economy
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with (L/100km)
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is The Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km (L/100km)
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous feature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a bar graph
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel below the DTE, this function cannot be reset. Press the
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT BACK button to return to the main menu.
button.
ACC/Cruise Control — If Equipped
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙ACC⬙ (if
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control) or ⬙Cruise⬙ is
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC or Cruise is
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display. Press
the BACK button to return to the main menu.
displayed in the menu line also. Press and release the
SELECT (right arrow) button to display the following
information:
• If equipped with ACC, one of several messages will be
displayed giving a dynamic status update of the
feature as the driver changes feature status or following conditions change. If ACC is active and a warning
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
or other feature is in the EVIC main display, the ACC time will toggle the unit of measure between mph
status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer or km/h. Press the BACK button to return to the main
menu.
line.
• For vehicles with Cruise, one of several messages will
be displayed giving a dynamic status update of the
feature as the driver changes feature status or conditions change. If Cruise is active and a warning or other
feature is in the EVIC main display, the Cruise status
will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
Trip Info
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Trip
Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
Press and release the BACK button to return to the main
SELECT button to display the following three trip feamenu.
tures in the next screen:
Vehicle Speed
• Trip A
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Vehicle
Speed⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT • Trip B
button to view a digital display of the current speed • Elapsed Time
in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Resetting A Trip Info Function
Trip Computer functions or press the BACK button to To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
return to the main menu.
function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa- buttons. Push the SELECT button until the feature displays zero.
tion:
Trip A
Tire PSI
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Tire PSI⬙
reset.
is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the SELECT
button and one of the following will be displayed:
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last • If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
reset.
the ICON.
Elapsed Time
• If one or more tires have low pressure, ⬙Tire Pressure
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
LOW⬙ is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
ON/RUN position.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, ⬙Service
Tire Pressure System⬙ is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be • Oil Temperature
reset. Press and release the BACK button to return to the
Displays the actual oil temperature.
main menu.
• Oil Pressure
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ⬙Vehicle
Info⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the • Trans Temperature
SELECT button and Coolant Temp will be displayed.
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through the
• Engine Hours
following information displays.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Messages #
• AWD Status — If Equipped
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning mesDisplays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
and ⬙AWD⬙ if All Wheel Drive is active. Displays a
will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and ⬙RWD⬙ if
Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main
All Wheel Drive is inactive.
Menu.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Presssetting (i.e., ON, OFF).
ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the Soft-Keys
menu back.
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Touchscreen.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and 8.4 Settings
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel Press the “More” soft-key, then press the “Settings”
that allows you to access and change the customer soft-key to display the menu setting screen. In this mode
programmable features.
the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Hard-Keys
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup.
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and time.
Turn Menu OFF
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the • Display Brightness With Headlights ON
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and release
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
Once the setting is complete press the “Back Arrow” between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the “X” arrow soft-key.
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
“Up” or “Down” arrow soft-keys on the right side of the • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the When in this display, you may select the brightness with
available settings.
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
Display
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings arrow soft-key.
will be available.
• Set Language
• Display Mode
When in this display, you may select one of three
When in this display you may select one of the auto languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
release the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then
the “Set Language” soft-key and then touch the desired
touch the back arrow soft-key.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the • Touchscreen Beep
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
• Units
pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or to return to the previous menu.
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting, • Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster — If
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back Equipped
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
• Voice Response Length
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
When in this display, you may change the Voice Reyour selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped
Clock
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting touch the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a
• Control Screen Time-Out
check-mark appears next to the setting, indicating that
When this feature is selected, the “Controls” screen will the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
not time-out, return to previous screen, if a selection is soft-key to return to the previous menu.
not made within 20 seconds. To make your selection, • Set Time Hours
touch the “Control Screen Time-Out” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
to return to the previous menu.
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Time Minutes
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to Safety & Driving Assistance
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance soft-key
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X” the following settings will be available.
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
• Time Format
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be set to
When in this display, you may select the time format Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of FCW is
display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting, possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the
Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. This
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the allows for a more dynamic driving experience. To change
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time the FCW status, touch and release the OFF, Near or Far
Status setting touch the “Show Time in Status Bar” button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Vehicle”.
• Rear Park Assist Volume — If Equipped
• Park Assist — If Equipped
Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate • Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mirParkSense® status, touch and release the Sound Only or rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back position and the transmission shift lever is in the REsoft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper- previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
ating information.
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
• Front Park Assist Volume — If Equipped
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
to return to the previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
Lights
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
previous menu.
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) • Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams”
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ —
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on apIf Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
Vehicle” for further information.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but- When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
To make your selection, press the “Flash Lamps with
Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Steering Directed Headlights — If Equipped
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, press the “Steering Directed Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
• Flash Lamps With Lock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Lamps With Lock
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the front and headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
selection, touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob— If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
(RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your
for further information.
selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
• Passive Entry
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key the following settings will be available.
Engine Off Options
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when • Engine Off Power Delay
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperaWhen this feature is selected, the power window
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
• Headlight Off Delay
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off differences, and provide the most accurate compass
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your heading.
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
return to the previous menu.
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
pressing the “ON” soft-key and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
Compass Variance Map
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and it may need to
be calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow
soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your Phone/Bluetooth®
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the foldirectly on the desired setting.
lowing settings will be available.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Paired Devices
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle This feature shows which phones are paired to the
speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off, Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
• Music Info Cleanup
SiriusXM Setup
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” soft-key the following
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
settings will be available.
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
• Channel Skip
pressing the back arrow soft-key.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
the back arrow soft-key.
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to resubscribe.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting The Analog Clock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies delivering substantial increases in component and system effiThis feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
ciency levels.
plugged into the USB port.
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
supply and drives a 7.5-channel playback architecture.
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple- The GreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure
ment Manual.
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in
dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the ampliPERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
fier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
surround sound processing.
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology delivYour vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior position. This surround effect is available for audio from
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUX input; and is activated through the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Surround Sound” under “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
control is different depending on which mode you are in. seconds after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
4
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys
Soft-Keys
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® screen.
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
Soft-Keys)
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
1. MAX A/C Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
Press and release to change the current setting, the manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing Operation” for more information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature setturns off after 10 minutes.
tings.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will 10. Blower Control
automatically exit Sync.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
forced through the climate system. There are seven
Provides the passenger with independent temperature blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will as follows:
automatically exit Sync.
Hard-Key
9. SYNC
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Soft-Key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
• Floor Mode
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
11. Modes
• Panel Mode
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
• Mix Mode
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
snowy conditions.
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
12. Climate Control OFF Button
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
Provides the driver with independent temperature conbutton to turn off the air conditioning and manually
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
NOTE:
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Provides the driver with independent temperature conselect Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loadjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
time.
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
Climate Control Functions
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
A/C (Air Conditioning)
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
MAX A/C
Max A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.Press and release to toggle between Max A/C and
the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when Max
A/C is ON.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (soft-key button greyed out). The
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Automatic Operation
Recirculation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and paspressing the Recirculation control button. The
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8,
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
13, 14). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
comfort level.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
Manual Operation Override
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
Summer Operation
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Window Fogging
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly reVehicle” for proper coolant selection.
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Winter Operation
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winUse of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
A/C Air Filter
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
periods, as fogging may occur.
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or instructions.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .374
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .371
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Operation Eight-Speed Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Operation Five-Speed Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .395
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .405
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .407
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .405
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .418
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .421 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .437
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .426 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .439
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .440
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .428
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .453
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .461
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . .
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . .
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . .
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .462
. . . . . . .463
. . . . . . .463
. . . . . . .463
. . . . . . .464
. . . . . . .464
. . . . . . .465
. . . . . . .465
. . . . . . .468
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .477
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two OFF position.
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availThe ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
If Engine Fails To Start
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
WARNING!
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition to the OFF position.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
decrease as the engine warms up.
Module.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
After Starting
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in Equipped
the OFF position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient eight-speed
transmission. The electronic shift lever in this vehicle
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
does not slide like a conventional shifter. Instead, the
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
rearward, always returning to the center position after
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
each gear is selected.
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be cycled to the
ON/RUN position (engine running, for vehicles with The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
8-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be on the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
pressed.
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the
first (or second) detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
Shift Lever
shifting between these gears.
Optional Shifter With AutoStick®
Standard Shifter
The optional shift lever (with AutoStick® shift paddles
The standard shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU- mounted on the steering wheel) provides PARK, RETRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift positions.
position manually downshifts the transmission to a Once in the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE
lower gear based on vehicle speed.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
mode. You do not need to press the lock button when Shifting From REVERSE To NEUTRAL
toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes.
Pull the shift lever rearward to the first detent and
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift release. “N” will be highlighted in the EVIC.
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section). Pressing To shift back into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, firmly
the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the shift
position will manually select the transmission gear, and lever, then push the shift lever forward to the first detent
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as and release. “R” will be highlighted in the EVIC.
1, 2, 3, etc.
Shifting From NEUTRAL To DRIVE
Shifting From PARK To DRIVE
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
Firmly press the brake pedal, press the lock button on the
shift lever, then pull the shift lever rearward and release.
shift lever, then pull and hold the shift lever fully “D” will be highlighted in the EVIC.
rearward until “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
To shift back into NEUTRAL from DRIVE, push the shift
To shift back into PARK from DRIVE, bring the vehicle to lever forward to the first detent and release. “N” will be
a complete stop, firmly press the brake pedal, press the highlighted in the EVIC.
lock button on the shift lever, then push and hold the
shift lever fully forward until “P” is highlighted in the
EVIC.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Shifting From REVERSE To DRIVE
Vehicles Equipped With LOW Mode
Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the To shift from DRIVE to LOW, pull the shift lever rearbrake pedal, then pull the shift lever fully rearward and ward until “L” is highlighted in the EVIC.
release when “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
To shift back into DRIVE from LOW, pull the shift lever
To shift back into REVERSE from DRIVE, bring the rearward until “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
vehicle to a complete stop, firmly press the brake pedal,
Gear Ranges
press the lock button on the shift lever, then push the shift
lever forward to the second detent and release when “R” DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
is highlighted in the EVIC.
Shifting From DRIVE To SPORT/LOW
Vehicles Equipped With SPORT Mode
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
To shift from DRIVE to SPORT, pull the shift lever
PARK (P)
rearward until “S” is highlighted in the EVIC.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
To shift back into DRIVE from SPORT, pull the shift lever
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
rearward until “D” is highlighted in the EVIC.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- DRIVE.
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
LOW (L) — If Equipped
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (if equipped) or the LOW range (if equipped) to Use this range for engine braking when descending very
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downgear will improve performance and extend transmission shift for increased engine braking. To switch between
DRIVE and LOW modes, tap the shift lever rearward.
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
LOW mode is only accessible from DRIVE.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enTransmission function is monitored electronically for
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 1. Stop the vehicle.
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and 3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
turns OFF.
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
5. Restart the engine.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
following steps.
operation.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles
(-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
service is required.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
NOTE:
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
OFF position first.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
damaging the transmission.
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes, touch the can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
SPORT button (on the Controls screen in the center touch following steps:
panel).
1. Stop the vehicle.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop. 5. Restart the engine.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will conoperation.
tinue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
AUTOSTICK® — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downIf the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
service is required.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situaThe automatic transmission includes an electronically
tions.
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con- Operation Eight-Speed Transmission — If
Equipped
ditions are present:
Overdrive Operation
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply tap one of
the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick®
mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick® mode will • If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode,
retain the current gear. When AutoStick® is active, the
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The
current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the
up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as deautomatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
scribed below.
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
transmission will automatically shift up when maximanually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
mum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fully
accelerates.
depressed, the transmission will downshift when possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear). Lack
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmisover-speed, that shift will not occur.
sion to revert to automatic operation.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
To disengage AutoStick® mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick® mode at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Operation Five-Speed Transmission — If
Equipped
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the
DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheelmounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to
enter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission
to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When
AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode,
the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is
manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or
the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. On some models, the
transmission will downshift (when possible, based on
vehicle speed and gear) if the accelerator is fully
depressed.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, • The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
manual gear selection will be maintained until either
of a vehicle speed.
SPORT mode is exited or as described below. The • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
transmission will not upshift automatically at redline
in this mode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
until “D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster.
display the current gear.
You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at any time
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
WARNING!
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
icy conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
the windshield wipers for an extended period of time.
Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is displayed momentarily in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the
gauge area of the vehicle display when the transmission
is first shifted into gear, and if the drive mode changes
during vehicle operation.
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
wheels as necessary.
NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning message appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatimeans that the AWD system is not functioning properly
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
Instrument Panel” for further information.
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
CAUTION!
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se- size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
lected by activating AutoStick® mode (+/-) or activating the transfer case.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
Acceleration
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
WARNING! (Continued)
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
(Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
message and a flashing icon are displayed on
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrolikely
the
vehicle
has lost power steering assistance. Refer
hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
to
“Electronic
Vehicle
Information (EVIC)” in “Underprevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
standing
Your
Instrument
Panel” for further information.
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP - SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL” message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily
until the over temperature condition no longer exists.
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
PARKING BRAKE
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a NOTE:
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmisdisengage.
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
Parking Brake
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition driver is not in the vehicle.
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased ve- You also may experience the following when the brake
hicle stability and brake performance under most braking system goes into Anti-Lock:
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
short time after the stop).
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control
• Brake pedal pulsations.
of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
of the stop.
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
All four of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer
to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Off” switch is located on the switch bank in the
The ESC system has two or three available operating center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the
modes:
⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will illuminate. To turn the ESC
ESC On
on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and
the ⬙ESC off indicator light⬙ will turn off.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
WARNING!
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. The ESC should only be turned OFF for • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature deESC Operating Modes
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
NOTE:
Full Off — If Equipped
• To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial
Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off”
switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESC on again by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To turn
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
WARNING!
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. When in “Partial In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS reduction and stability features are disabled. Thereis disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
by the ESC system is reduced.
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
(Continued)
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
(Continued)
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
HSA Off
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
the Uconnect® settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further infor- function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
mation.
no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON NOTE:
position. It should go out with the engine
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authothat caused the ESC activation.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loElectronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
off or full off.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Synchronizing ESC
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15
LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information
Placard
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Loading
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occugross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
Economy
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
At least once a month:
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgeOver-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatWARNING!
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
WARNING!
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. AlHigh speed driving with your vehicle under maxiways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Tire Repair
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
75 mph (120 km/h).
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped
the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance for a Rear Wheel Drive
(RWD) vehicle, on 235/55R18 100V and P235/55R18
99V tires, reduced size snow chains or traction devices
with a maximum projection of 6 mm beyond the tire
profile is recommended.
• Due to limited clearance for an All Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle, P235/55R19 tire with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire
chain or traction device.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
unequal rates.
reversed.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
the tire.
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
Base System
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each sound.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• TPM Telltale Light
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will be
displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is
low in one or more of the four active road tires. An
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the
system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn off. The vehicle
wheel housings.
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
information.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Service TPMS Warning
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
fault can occur due to any of the following:
sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message will turn ON. The ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
will also be displayed.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
(24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and
15 mph (24 km/h), the ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message will turn
off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message as long as no tire pressure is
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off
Vehicles With Compact Spare
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the compact spare tire.
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnis below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and ⬙LOW
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
TIRE⬙ message will turn ON. The ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
message will also be displayed.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will
only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when
it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with
a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
The TPMS consists of the following components:
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
• Receiver module
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
• Four TPM sensors
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec- each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
• TPM Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
5
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
wheel housings.
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
is not being received.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message is then followed with a graphic display with
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presof the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
following:
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnlimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In
addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure mesTelltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure
flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a
value flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed.
different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
and stop flashing or return to its original color as long
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
limit in any of the four active road tires.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
eration.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of ing licenses:
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
MRXC4W4MA4
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active United States
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum
performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- E-85 perform the following:
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
• Operate in a lean mode.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
MMT In Gasoline
• Poor engine performance.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
life and reduces emissions system performance in some Fuel System Cautions
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
CAUTION!
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
and California reformulated gasoline.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforMaterials Added To Fuel
mance and damage the emissions control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
or malfunctioning and may require immediate serTherefore, you should not have to add anything to the
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
fuel.
assistance.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatwhen the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
refueling.
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuduring warm up.
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
mended.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol comrange of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
patible parts.
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera- compatible components can damage your vehicle.
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
ADDING FUEL
5
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
emergency refueling with a gas can.
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
WARNING!
Fuel Funnel
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the trunk.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
Release Cable
VEHICLE LOADING
Access Cover
3. Pull the release cable.
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating • Type of Vehicle
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Vehicle Certification Label
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
The label contains the following information:
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
• Name of manufacturer
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
NOTE:
Common Towing Definitions
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and you in understanding the following information:
GAWRs.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
tire pressure.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
In this section you will find safety tips and information Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do further information.
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
and safely as possible.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Trailer Sway Control
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Max. Tongue Weight (See
Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on Consider the following items when computing the
your bumper or trailer hitch.
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Towing Requirements
WARNING! (Continued)
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
tire inflation procedures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
sures before trailer usage.
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
inspection procedure.
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information
WARNING!
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
and GAWR limits.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
collision.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
(Continued)
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
5
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
or frequent trailer towing⬙ (five-speed transmission
heavy traffic.
only). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
Automatic Transmission
proper maintenance intervals.
Towing Tips
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the • When using the speed control, if you experience speed
AutoStick® shift control (if equipped) or the LOW range
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
(if equipped) to select a lower gear.
you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
under heavy loading conditions will improve performaximize fuel efficiency.
mance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also AutoStick® — If Equipped
provide better engine braking.
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if Air Conditioning
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
Turn off temporarily.
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces- MOTORHOME, ETC.)
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
conditions allow.
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
Cooling System
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind anTo reduce potential for engine and transmission over- other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .481 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
6
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel between the center air IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
outlets.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
6
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
6
Opening The Access Panel
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
Preparations For Jacking
example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
6
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Jacking Locations
6
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
use, and operation.
them checked with a torque wrench by your autho8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
rized dealer or at a service station.
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
WARNING!
tightening down the fastener.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
WARNING!
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Road Tire Installation
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
lug nuts.
seated against the wheel.
6
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and engine compartment for jump-starting.
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
WARNING!
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system instart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
spected at your authorized dealer.
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
6
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: For vehicles with 8-speed transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port
(in the left side of the storage bin), and push and hold
the override release lever in.
Shift Lever Override
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual
Park Release lever.
6
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Console Storage Bin
Locking Tab
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the 5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
tether strap up through the opening in the console
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
base.
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
it to the right.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
Tether Strap
6
504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift
Flatbed
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Front
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
IF Transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
(5-speed trans)
• 30 mi (48 km) max distance
(8-speed trans)
OK
ALL
BEST METHOD
• Ignition in ON/RUN
position
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Manual
Park Release” or “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to the front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position, not in the OFF or ACC position.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position,
not in the OFF or ACC position.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
6
506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, vehicles
equipped with AWD can also be towed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL
(not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with
no limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition
MUST be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner,
AWD vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels
OFF the ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is
unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case
and/or transmission.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
8-speed transmission.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km) for 5-speed transmission, or 30 miles
(48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear
Without The Key Fob
wheels OFF the ground (on a flatbed, or with the rear
wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
NEUTRAL).
approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .513
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . .541
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp . . . . . .562
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps . . .564
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .548
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .553
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
Post)
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
Post)
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
not crank or start the engine.
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running.
penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
fully warmed engine is shut off.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
on these engines.
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inmanufacturer only recommends
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
API Certified engine oils.
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
should not be used.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic Engine Oils
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomEngine Oil Filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is tenance required.
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “Jumpserious personal injury.
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Battery Location
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf —
If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
Windshield Wiper Blades
Adding Washer Fluid
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
from a dry windshield.
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering, The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
equipped).
sary.
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCheck engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only ac- Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
cording to Chrysler Service Manual procedure or by an
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
face of the condenser.
maintenance intervals.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
leaks.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
local authorized dealer.
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
Coolant Checks
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
Adding Coolant
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
recovery tank.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporno need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
sions.
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately leak and a checkup may be needed.
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail- Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reure.
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder when per- taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
forming underhood services.
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Special Additives
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this any special additives in the transmission.
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Fluid And Filter Changes — 5-Speed Transmission
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans- fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole.
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
mission is disassembled for any reason.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differUnder normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
hole.
required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans- Fluid Changes
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Fluid And Filter Changes — 8-Speed Transmission
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
maintenance intervals.
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and Rear Axle
front differential. The exterior surface of these compoFor normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
Your Vehicle” for further information.
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contamiFluid Level Check
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condiaxle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. underbody protection.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Change Axle Fluid
resistance built into your vehicle.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper What Causes Corrosion?
maintenance intervals.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
• Stone and gravel impact.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with Special Care
clear water.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumunear the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
a month.
and Tar Remover to remove.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
open.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
the owner.
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
packaged and sealed.
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winCleaning Headlights
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break- not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
age than glass headlights.
scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
directly on the mirror.
cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
CAUTION!
Front Power Distribution Center
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Mini-Fuse
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
25 Amp Natural
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Power Steering #1
Starter
Anti-Lock Brakes
Anti-Lock Brakes
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #2
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Cavity
19
20
21
22
23
24
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
–
25 Amp Natural
–
–
25 Amp Natural
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
Description
Power Steering #2
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Transmission Shifter
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
37
38
39
48
49
50
51
52
53
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
Description
Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays
Airbag Module
Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
7
CAUTION!
Opening The Access Cover
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
(Continued)
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
—
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof
Exterior Lighting #1
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Cavity
7
8
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
—
—
9
10
11
12
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
15
16
17
18
19
20
40 Amp Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting/Washer
Pump
Power Locks
Driver Door
Passenger Door
Cigar Lighters, Instrument Panel & Power Outlet Console Rear
HVAC Blower
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
21
22
23
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
10 Amp Red
24
25
26
27
31
32
33
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
—
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
34
—
10 Amp Red
35
—
10 Amp Red
Description
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
Radio Screen
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fuse — Spare
Amplifier
Power Seats
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/Wireless
Module
Steering Column
Module/Clock
Battery Sensor
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Cavity
36
37
38
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
40
41
42
43
—
—
30 Amp Pink
—
—
—
—
25 Amp Natural
44
—
10 Amp Red
45
—
15 Amp Blue
46
47
—
—
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Fuse — Spare
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Defrost
Rear Heated Seats/
Steering Wheel
Park Assist/Blind Spot/
Camera
Cluster/Rearview
Mirror/Compass
Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive Front Lighting
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
48
49
50
51
52
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
53
—
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
—
—
Description
Active Suspension
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Front Heated Seats
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches
HVAC Module/In Car
Temperature Sensor
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Airbag Module
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Cavity
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
25 Amp Natural
10 Amp Red
—
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
69
70
—
—
—
—
Description
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Rear Windows
Airbag Module
Fuse — Spare
Run Sense
Illumination/Rear Sunshade
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
W5W
Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
Rear Compartment
562
(Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console Read578
ing Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If
194
Equipped
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at
Pocket/Cupholder
Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
Low Beam/High Beam
(Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn
Lamp
Bulb Number
HIR2LL
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
PSY24WSV
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
H11
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Backup Lamp
Center High Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Rear Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
Bulb Number
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
W21W
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
W5W
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the ignition turned to the OFF
position. Because of this, you should not attempt to
service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb
fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Standard Low Beam And High Beam Headlamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp (outboard) bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
4. Twist the headlamp bulb assembly counterclockwise,
and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring assembly and NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
install the replacement bulb.
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
6. Reinstall the bulb and wiring assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the turn
signal (inboard) bulb cap.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate it clockwise to lock it.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
unlock it.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the hood.
4. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the lamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the wiring connector and
install the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly straight into
the lamp until it locks in place.
7. Install the turn signal bulb cap in the headlamp
housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the trunk.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
2. Remove the trunk trim by removing the grocery hook
install the replacement bulb.
(using a T-20 torque driver or similar tool), remove the
fastener, and pull back the weather strip.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
3. Pull back the trunk liner to gain access to the tail lamp
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
wing nuts.
connector, and trunk trim.
4. Remove the three wing nuts from the back of the tail
lamp assembly.
13. Close the trunk.
5. Pull the tail lamp assembly away from the vehicle License Lamp
enough to access the electrical connector.
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
6. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
8. Continue removing lamp from vehicle in order to 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
access the bulb(s).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
Socket Assembly
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines
19 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System *
3.6 Liter Engine – We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/
10 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System – We rec14.5 Quarts
ommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula.
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System – We recom15 Quarts
mend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
72 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
9.5 Liters
13.9 Liters
14.3 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
7
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
(Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
(Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
87 Octane.
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed
Transmission
Automatic Transmission – 5-Speed
Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission
Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use
ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent
meeting MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
We recommend you use API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intermiles (805 km).
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573 M
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
A
I
N
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following T
E
page for the required maintenance intervals.
N
A
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
N
Change Indicator System:
C
E
• Change oil and filter
Required Maintenance Intervals.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle
fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
2
32,000
M 574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
E Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
N
A
N
Or Years:
C
E
Or Kilometers:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).**
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).**
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing
(five-speed only).
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(five-speed only).
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing (All Wheel Drive Only).
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
N
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577 M
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 578 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .582
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .582
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .586
9
580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 581
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247–9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD,
for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should In Canada
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the should contact the Customer Service Department immemanufacturer.
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an defect to the Canadian government should contact Transinvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
586 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 587
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
590 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .220
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .521
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
INDEX 591
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Bluetooth®
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio
Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . .152
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone . .132
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .357
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .383
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
10
592 INDEX
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock .
Brightness, Interior Lights . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . .
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.537
.537
.400
.310
.374
.204
.560
.103
.519
.534
.100
.292
.292
.462
.543
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .307
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .88
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .82
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
INDEX 593
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
.351
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
.346
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
.288
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
.369
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
.350
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
.432
.327 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
.347 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
.347 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
.325 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
.288
.583 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
.534 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .205
.530 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
.533 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
.566 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
.531 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
.534 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
10
594 INDEX
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .33
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .325
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .548
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .216
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .313
INDEX 595
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .313
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
EVIC Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .513
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
10
596 INDEX
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Flashers
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Hazard Warning . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Cruising Range . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fuel Requirements . . . .
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Maintenance . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . .
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Flooded Engine Starting . .
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Fluid Level Checks . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Automatic Transmission
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.458
.457
.456
.459
.458
.458
.369
.288
.569
.566
.103
.542
.540
.537
INDEX 597
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.531
.517
.541
.567
.198
.186
.245
.498
.451
.454
.452
.325
.452
.308
.451
.308
.319
.454
.452
Octane Rating .
Requirements .
Saver Mode . .
Specifications .
Tank Capacity .
Fuel, Flexible . . .
Fuel Optimizer . .
Fuel Saver . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.451
.451
.325
.567
.566
.456
.325
.325
.548
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.262
.452
.451
.325
.452
. . . . . . . . . . . .312
. . . . . . . . . . . .308
. . . . . . . . . . . .308
10
598 INDEX
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override .
General Information . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.304
.377
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.499
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.163
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.546
.463
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.463 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.463 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.397 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.481 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
.562 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.195 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.546
.195 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.201 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.198
.195
.201
.194
.195
.527
.527
.184
.184
.116
.181
.371
.201
.410
. . .468
. . .288
. . .192
INDEX 599
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Additional Key Fobs . .
Programming Additional Transmitters
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . .
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . .
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . .
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . .
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.13
.19
.23
.24
.18
.18
.25
.24
.23
.15
.34
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.24
.34
.23
.34
.34
.23
.23
10
600 INDEX
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.22
.12
.17
.12
.16
.59
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.309
.309
.195
.413
.310
.561
.198
.200
.413
.103
.198
.481
.194
.198
.195
.194
.201
.304
.201
INDEX 601
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .307
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .205
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .307
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .304
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
10
602 INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .307
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
INDEX 603
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .422
Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .279
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
10
604 INDEX
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.429
.534
.350
.348
.208
.541
.258
.286
.248
.186
.294
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
INDEX 605
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .348
Remote Starting
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . .29
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .342
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .54
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
10
606 INDEX
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .307
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
INDEX 607
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .348
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .59
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
10
608 INDEX
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.357
.312
.210
.195
.421
.414
.103
.435
.426
.437
.484
.432
.426
.428
.427
.484
.435
.421
.440
Pressure Warning Light . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.305
.587
.429
.436
.439
.414
.416
.430
.485
.434
.472
.434
.414
.469
.192
.465
.504
.469
.477
INDEX 609
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.469
.477
.396
.405
.465
.477
.468
.471
.476
.469
.474
.469
.469
.541
.541
.541
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . .
Customer Programmable Features
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .372
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .539
. . . . . . . . . . .347
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.151
.342
.130
.142
.147
10
610 INDEX
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Uconnect® Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .347
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .304
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
INDEX 611
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Windshield Washers . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.206
.527
.527
.206
.527
.206
.208
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s
electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals.
Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed
properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed
during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative
power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to
the negative battery connection. This connection should not be
fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the
rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas
with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation
of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away
from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded
coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low
Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic
systems.
2014 300
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
14C481-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
300